Sie sind auf Seite 1von 250

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03

Commissioning Guide (U2000)


Issue Date 01 2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 950 iManager U2000 Version V100R003C03 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document describes how to commission the OptiX RTN 950, including preparations before commissioning, site commissioning, and system commissioning. The intended audience of this document are: Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

About This Document

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the first release of the V100R003C03 version.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3 1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................7 1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................7 1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................9 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................11 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................11 1.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................11 1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12 1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................13 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................13 1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14 1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................16 1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................19


2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................20 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................22 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................23 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24

3 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................26
3.1 Commissioning Process....................................................................................................................................27 3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process...................................................................................................................27 3.1.2 System Commissioning Process..............................................................................................................29 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method........................................................................................................30 3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools.......................................................................................................................31 3.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions..............................................................................................................33 3.4.1 Site Commissioning.................................................................................................................................33 3.4.2 System Commissioning...........................................................................................................................33 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

Contents

4 Site Commissioning....................................................................................................................34
4.1 Powering On the Equipment.............................................................................................................................35 4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT......................................................................37 4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU......................................................................................................46 4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.............................................................................................48 4.2.3 Logging In to an NE................................................................................................................................51 4.2.4 Changing the NE ID................................................................................................................................52 4.2.5 Changing the NE Name...........................................................................................................................53 4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................54 4.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards....................................................................................................................55 4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group......................................................................................................56 4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........................................................................58 4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup...............................................................................................................59 4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup.................................................................60 4.2.12 Synchronizing NE Time........................................................................................................................61 4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire....................................................................................................................62 4.2.14 Checking Alarms...................................................................................................................................63 4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool..............................................................64 4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU..............................................................................................64 4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes...............................................................................................................................66 4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link........................................................................................................................68 4.3.4 Checking Alarms.....................................................................................................................................72 4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables........................................................................................................................73 4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT...................................................................73 4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool...........................................................74 4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables................................................................................................76 4.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection........................................................................................................77 4.5 Aligning the Antennas......................................................................................................................................79 4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes......................................................................................................................79 4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................82 4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..........................................................................................................85 4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links.................................................................................................................88 4.7 Querying the DCN Status.................................................................................................................................89

5 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................90
5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..........................................................................................................92 5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.............................................................................................92 5.1.2 Changing the NE ID................................................................................................................................94 5.1.3 Changing the NE Name...........................................................................................................................95 5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters..................................................................................................95 5.1.5 Configuring the Logical Board................................................................................................................96 5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group......................................................................................................97 5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........................................................................99 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

Contents

5.1.8 Configuring ATPC Attributes...............................................................................................................101 5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time..................................................................................................................102 5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services................................................................105 5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources............................................................................................................106 5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................107 5.2 Testing E1 Services........................................................................................................................................108 5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester.........................................................................................108 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS..........................................................................................................110 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................................111 5.4 Testing ATM Services....................................................................................................................................115 5.5 Testing AM Switching....................................................................................................................................118 5.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester....................................................................................118 5.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester......................................................................................120 5.6 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................122 5.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching......................................................................................................................122 5.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching........................................................................................................125 5.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching.......................................................................................................................128 5.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching.......................................................................................................................132 5.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching.............................................................................................133 5.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching..............................................................................................................136 5.7 Checking the Clock Status..............................................................................................................................140 5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link..................................................................................................................140 5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER.....................................................................................................................................144

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool........................................................................................147


6.1 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................................148 6.2 Operation Interface.........................................................................................................................................148

7 Configuration Example of Service Data................................................................................150


7.1 Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................................151 7.2 Board Configurations.....................................................................................................................................151 7.3 Service Planning.............................................................................................................................................152 7.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................154

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................158
A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...........................................................................................................160 A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE.........................................................................................................164 A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change...................................................................................164 A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs....................................................................................165 A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting....................................................................166 A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation....................................................168 A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC.......................................................................................173 A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection....................................................................180 A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.........................................................................................183 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration.............................................................................186 A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................................196 A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................................198 A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation...................................................................201 A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table..................................................................................204 A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General................................................................................................205 A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced.............................................................................................207

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................209
B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................210 B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................210 B.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................219 B.4 K-O................................................................................................................................................................224 B.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................230 B.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................239

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1
About This Chapter

Safety Precautions

This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD. 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. 1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions


To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device. The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations


When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements


The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device. Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software). The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. l l l l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last. Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact. Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor. The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Human Safety
l l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables. When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

1 Safety Precautions

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

l l l

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams. Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn. In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.

Device Safety
l l l l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack. When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked. When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required. After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols


Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 Symbol Indication This symbol is for ESD protection. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

This symbol is for the laser class. A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may damage you eyes or skin.

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Symbol

Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded.

ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically.

DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

This symbol is for fan safety. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.

Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

High Leakage Current

WARNING
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device. Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTION
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNING
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time. Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas


This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries


This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. l l l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage. If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards. A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l l l l l Use special insulation tools. Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures. Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte. When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited. Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Battery Leakage

CAUTION
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.

1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers


The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l l l l l l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin. Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton) Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers


When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibers


l l l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power damages the optical interface. Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port. Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface. Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting optical interface

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level optical interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure


This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas


The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction. A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.

1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the eyes may be damaged. In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers


To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions: l l l l l l l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off. Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling


Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: l l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers. Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.7 Working at Heights


This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l l l l l The personnel who work at heights must be trained. Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down. Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken. Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas. Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNING
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects. l l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations. Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition. Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity. Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations. Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders


This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder. Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points: l l l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides. Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks. Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 1-6. Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.8 Mechanical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. l l l l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet. Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps. Wear protection gloves when drilling holes. Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device. When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects


Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

WARNING
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you. l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained. When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions


This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l l l Slide the board along the guide rails. Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage. When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

l l

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNING
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Notices for High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter


This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment. 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch


The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch


The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

O: OFF

I : ON

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.

Turn it to the left.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.

Turn it to the right.

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper


Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper. Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper. ----End

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable


Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable. Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable. ----End

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board


Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board. Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board. ----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

3 Commissioning Preparations

3
About This Chapter

Commissioning Preparations

This chapter describes the preparations that need to be made prior to commissioning equipment. 3.1 Commissioning Process Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method By using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioning method. 3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the equipment. 3.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both scenarios.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

3 Commissioning Preparations

3.1 Commissioning Process


Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning.

3.1.1 Site Commissioning Process


Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning. You can use the following methods to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN 950 on site: l l Web LCT Handheld tool
NOTE

You can commission only basic items by using the handheld tool.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on site when they are: l l l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950. Aware of the radio link data plan for the site. Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT Commissioning Item Powering On the Equipment Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT Connecting the Web LCT Creating NEs by Using the Search Method Log in to an NE Changing the NE ID Changing the Name of an NE Setting the Communication Parameters of an NE Configuring Logical Boards
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks Required Required Required Required Required Optional Required Required

27

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Item Configuring IF 1+1 protection Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link Synchronizing NE Time Configuring Orderwire Checking Alarms Testing Connectivity of Cables Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables (by Using the Web LCT) Testing Connectivity of Network Cables Testing Connectivity of Optical Fibers Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas Querying the Status of Radio Links Querying the DCN Status

Remarks Optional Required

Required Optional Required Required when E1 cables are used on the site Required when network cables are used on the site Required when optical fibers are used on the site Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas Required Required

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool on site when they are: l l l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950. Aware of the radio link data plan for the site. Equipped with the handheld tool.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using the handheld tool Commissioning Item Powering On the Equipment Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU Setting NE Attributes Configuring a Radio Link Checking Alarms Testing Connectivity of Cables Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool Testing Connectivity of Network Cables Testing Connectivity of Optical Fibers Aligning the Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas Remarks Required Required Required Required Required Required when E1 cables are used on the site Required when network cables are used on the site Required when optical fibers are used on the site Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.

3.1.2 System Commissioning Process


System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network. Table 3-3 System commissioning process Commissioning Item Configuring Network-wide Service Data Testing E1 Services Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester Remarks Required Required when E1 service are available and a BER tester is available on site

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Item Testing E1 Services Through PRBS Testing Ethernet Services Testing ATM Services Testing AM Switching Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester Testing Protection Switching Testing IF 1+1 Switching Testing N+1 Protection Switching Testing SNCP Switching Testing ERPS Switching Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching Testing Linear MSP Switching Checking the Clock Status Testing 24-Hour BER

Remarks Required when E1 services are available and no BER tester is available on site Required when Ethernet services are available Required when ATM services are available Required when the AM function is enabled and a BER tester is available on site Required when the AM function is enabled and no BER tester is available on site Required when the radio links are configured with the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD Required when the N+1 protection is configured Required when the SNCP is configured Required when ERPS is configured Required when MPLS APS protection is configured Required when 1+1/1:N linear MSP is configured Required Required when E1 services are available

3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method


By using the U2000 for commissioning, engineers can adopt the network commissioning method.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

3 Commissioning Preparations

In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system commissioning are defined as follows: l Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of the radio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site. l System commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on all the NEs in the network by connecting the commissioning tool to a gateway NE where it configures the commissioning data for each site.

Single-hop Commissioning
The single-hop commissioning method is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission networks (for example, a network with only one or two radio link hops). By performing singlehop commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning items at a time. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs. Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs. Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items. Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items.
NOTE

The Web LCT is used for single-hop commissioning, and therefore this document does not detail how to use the Web LCT. For details about how to use the Web LCT, see the commissioning guide in the documentation package of the Web LCT version.

Network Commissioning
The network commissioning method is usually used for large-scale microwave transmission networks. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs. Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT or configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool. Use the U2000 to complete the site commissioning items at sites where services converge. Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at sites where services converge.

3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools


This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the equipment.

Documents
The following document should be available before commissioning the equipment: l Engineering design documents, including: Network plan Engineering design
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

3 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning guides, including: OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

Tools
Table 3-4 lists the tools required for the commissioning task. Table 3-4 Tools and meters Tool and Meter l Adjustable wrench l Screwdriver l Telescope l Interphone l Hex key l Multimeter that has a test cable with a BNC connector at one end l North-stabilized indicator Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed l Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT l Testing connectivity of E1 cables l Querying the DCN status Handheld tool l Configuring site commissioning data l Testing connectivity of E1 cables BER tester l Testing connectivity of E1 cables l Testing E1 services l Testing AM switching l Testing IF 1+1 switching l Testing N+1 protection switching l Testing SNCP switching l Testing linear MSP switching l Testing 24-hour BER Network cable tester l Optical power meter l Short fiber jumper PC on which the U2000 is installed E1 jumper Commissioning system items Testing 24-hour BER Testing connectivity of network cables Checking connectivity of optical fibers Application Scenario Aligning antennas

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

3 Commissioning Preparations

For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web LCT User Guide.

3.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions


Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both scenarios.

3.4.1 Site Commissioning


Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning. Details about these requirements are as follows: l l l l l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check. Power is available to the equipment. The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment have been properly routed. The appropriate risk control measures to arrest falling objects and ensure personnel safety are in place. Engineers are certified to commission the antennas. There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact the commissioning.

3.4.2 System Commissioning


Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning. Details about these requirements are as follows: l l Site commissioning at both ends of a radio link has been completed. There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact the commissioning.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

4
About This Chapter

Site Commissioning

Site commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all site commissioning items. 4.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly. 4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to perform site commissioning. 4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool. 4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test connectivity of the cables. 4.5 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links. 4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are in the normal state. 4.7 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the Search For Opposite NE, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

4.1 Powering On the Equipment


By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.

Prerequisite
l l l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check. The power system is available. The voltage, pole connection, and fuse current of the power system have been checked in the process of connecting power cables. The power supply (for example, the power box of the cabinet) has been turned off.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


None.

Context
l For the OptiX RTN 950, the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 4-1. Table 4-1 Fuse currents Chassis OptiX RTN 950 Fuse Current 20 A

The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control, switching, and timing board: Chassis OptiX RTN 950 Board Type CSH/CST

Precautions

CAUTION
l If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards, the nominal voltage for the input power of each PIU board must be the same. l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with a locking device. Hence, you must pull out the switches lightly before you turn it. If the switch points to "O", the switch is turned off. If the switch points to "I", the switch is turned on. l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not power on the cabinet. First, reconstruct the power supply and then test the output voltage again.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the power cables of the chassis are correctly connected. Then, power on the equipment and check the status of the indicators. In normal conditions, the PIU and FAN indicators are steady green, as shown in Figure 4-1. Table 4-2 provides the descriptions for the different states of the indicators. Table 4-2 Status of indicators Indicator PWR State Steady green Off FAN Steady green Steady red Off Description Indicates that the power supply is in the normal state. Indicates a power failure. Indicates that the fan is running properly. Indicates that the fan is faulty. Indicates that the fan is powered off.

Figure 4-1 Normal state


PIU indicator FAN indicator

Step 2 Check the status of the indicators on the system control, switching, and timing board and ensure that the equipment is powered on. The board indicators should conform to the following states and sequences. 1. The PROG indicator should be green, off, blinking green, and off. The process lasts about 1 minute if service data is not configured.
NOTE

This process lasts longer if service data is configured.

2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-2 Normal state

NOTE

l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU hardware description. l For a board other than the system control, switching, and timing board on the IDU, the STAT indicator is on only after the corresponding logical board is added.

Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I".


NOTE

l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of the IF board connected to the ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created. l In the event of indicator abnormalities, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT


This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to perform site commissioning.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

STAT PROG SYNC ACTX ACTC

37

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Configuration Process
Figure 4-3 describes the process of configuring site commissioning data.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-3 Configuration flowchart


Start

Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU

Creating NEs

Logging in to NEs

Changing NE IDs

Changing NE names

Setting NE communication parameters

Configuring logical boards

Procedure for configuring an radio link (XPIC enabled)

Synchronizing NE time

Procedure for configuring an radio link (XPIC disabled)

Creating an XPIC group

Creating an IF 1+1 protection group

Setting the AM attributes of the XPIC hybrid radio link

Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link

Creating an IF 1+1 protection group

Checking alarms

Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link

End

Checking alarms Mandatory

End

Optional

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

In TDM microwave mode, the AM attributes do not need to be configured for the links where the XPIC function is enabled.

Procedure for Configuring NE Data


Table 4-3 Procedure for configuring NE data Step 1 2 3 Action Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Creating NEs by Using the Search Method Logging In to an NE Description Mandatory. Mandatory. It is recommended that you create an NE in IP Auto Discovery mode. Mandatory. Enter correct values in User Name and Password. The default User Name is lct, and the default Password is password. 4 Changing the NE ID Mandatory. Set parameters as follows: l Set ID according to the guideline specified in the DCN plan. l If a specific extended NE ID is required, change Extended ID. 5 6 Changing the NE Name Setting NE Communication Parameters Optional. Mandatory if special requirements are imposed on the IP address of the NE. Set IP and Subnet Mask as required.
NOTE If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address changes to 0x81000000 + NE ID.

7 8

Configuring Logical Boards Synchronizing NE Time

Mandatory. Mandatory. This operation synchronizes NE time with the time on the computer that runs the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Disabled)


Table 4-4 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC disabled) Step 1 Action 4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Groupa Description Mandatory when radio links are configured with 1+1 protection. Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 2

Action 4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

Description Mandatory. l In the case of the TDM microwave, set main parameters as follows: Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network plan. Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. Set TX Status to Unmute. Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function.
NOTE l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM.

l For the Integrated IP radio, set main parameters as follows: Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network plan. Set AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan. Set Guarantee E1 Capacity and Link ID according to the network plan. Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. Set TX Status to Unmute. Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step

Action

Description misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function.
NOTE l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.

Checking Alarms

Mandatory.

Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Enabled)


Table 4-5 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC enabled) Step 1 Action 4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup Description Mandatory. Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 2

Action 4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup

Description Mandatory. Set parameters as follows: l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan. l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Enable Status to Disabled. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the modulation mode according to the network plan. l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.
NOTE In TDM microwave mode, the AM attributes do not need to be configured for the links where the XPIC function is enabled.

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

Mandatory when two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1 +1 protection groups. Set the parameters according to the network plan.
NOTE One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPIC workgroup can form a 1+1 protection group with the radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPIC workgroup.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 4

Action 4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

Description Mandatory. Configure the IF and ODU information in both horizontal and vertical polarization directions. Set parameters as follows: l In the case of the TDM microwave, set main parameters as follows: Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function. Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions. NOTE
l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM.

l For the Integrated IP radio, set main parameters as follows: Set Guarantee E1 Capacity according to the network plan. Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step

Action

Description Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions.
NOTE l After the site commissioning, however, you need to reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.

Checking Alarms

Mandatory.

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU


Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration and for other commissioning items.

Prerequisite
The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system. Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop. The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements: l The IP address of the laptop is in the same network segment (the default network segment is 129.9.0.0) as the NE, but their IP addresses are different. l The subnet mask for the IP address of the laptop is the same as that for the IP address of the NE (the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0). l The default gateway IP address is blank. Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

NMS/COM

CAUTION
Ensure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and the NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Otherwise, the equipment or test tool may be damaged.
NOTE

The NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board supports the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode. Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can both be used to set up a connection. For pin assignments for crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Network Cable in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description.

At this point, the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). A message will be displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to do so. If the operating system displays a message indicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address. Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer as the default browser. Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the Internet Explorer to medium or lower. Step 6 Optional: Disable the Pop-up Blocker.
NOTE

If plug-ins that can block pop-up windows are also installed, disable their blocking function.

Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the Internet Explorer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the Internet Explorer. Choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu of the Internet Explorer. On the General tab, click Settings in the Temporary Internet files area. In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and then click OK. After being returned to the General tab, click OK.

Step 8 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon. The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password, and then click Login. l User Name: admin l Password: admin If the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in the Internet Explorer.

----End

4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method


The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.

Prerequisite
l l The communication between the NMS and the NE is in the normal state. The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Click NE Search in NE List and select a desired search type.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

If... All NEs are directly connected to the NMS server through Ethernet cables

Then... Perform Step 2 to Step 5.

Not all NEs are directly connected to the NMS server through Perform Step 6 to Step 11. Ethernet cables Step 2 Select NE Search. The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Local IP Address based on the network planning information.


NOTE

Local IP Address indicates the IP address of an Ethernet port on the NMS server. There may be multiple Local IP Address values because an NMS server may have multiple network adapters.

Step 4 Set NE IP Address based on the network planning information.


NOTE

NE IP Address indicates the IP addresses of all NEs (searched out by the system automatically) that are connected to the NMS server directly through Ethernet cables.

Step 5 Click OK.


TIP

When NE Search is selected, the system can directly log in to NEs. You do not need to enter the user name and password.

Step 6 Select Advanced Search. The Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 7 Optional: If you select IP auto discovery, then: 1. 2. Click Search. After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

In the IP auto discovery mode, the Web LCT searches for the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE in the network segment where the server resides.

Step 8 Optional: If you select Search NE, then: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. Optional: Click Add to add a network segment. Then, set Domain Type and Domain Address. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Modify to modify the network segment. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Delete to delete the network segment. Click Search. After the WebLCT finds the NEs, click End Search.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

4 Site Commissioning

During initial configuration, Manage Domain takes the default value of 129.9.255.255. After the IP address of the gateway NE is changed, the value of Manage Domain also needs to be changed. The default network segment cannot be modified or deleted.

Step 9 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully. Step 10 Click OK. A new NE has been added to the NE list.

Step 11 Click Cancel. ----End

4.2.3 Logging In to an NE
After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The NE to be managed is already created in NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.
TIP

You can select multiple NEs at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

l The default User Name is lct. l The default Password for user lct is password.

Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE. Step 3 Click NE Explorer. The NE Explorer is displayed.
TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.


TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout diagram. l Click to collapse/expand the legend.

----End

Related References
A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE

4.2.4 Changing the NE ID


Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan and ensure that each NE ID is unique. Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Step 4 Click OK. Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box. ----End

Related References
A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change

4.2.5 Changing the NE Name


For ease of identification in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE's geographical location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in the Name field.
NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any spaces or Chinese characters.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 3 Click Apply. ----End

4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters


The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask.

Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply.
NOTE

l If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance. l If the new IP address in the IP field is not in the original network segment, reset the IP address of the Web LCT and ensure that it is in the same segment as the new IP address of the NE. Otherwise, the NE is unreachable to the Web LCT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

----End

Related References
A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

4.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards


Add the logical board in the slot layout if it has not already been added. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisite
l l l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher. All the boards are installed correctly. The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is turned on and the communication between the IDU and the ODU is normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards. Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required but are not yet configured for certain physical boards. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click and select Add XXX. "XXX" is the name of the board to be added. Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click and select Delete.
NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

----End

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group


If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1 +1 protection group.

Prerequisite
l l l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout. The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in the paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Background Information
When a 1+0 service is converted into 1+1 HSB protection group by configuring an IF 1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type to appropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet the network plan requirements. l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards, the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan. Click Apply.

Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. Step 4 Click New. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

NOTE

It is recommended to set the parameters for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection as follows: l Set Working Mode according to the network plan. l Set Revertive Mode to Revertive. l Set WTR Time(s) to the default value. l Set Enable Reverse Switching according to the network plan. When Working Mode is HSB, set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; when Working Mode is SD, set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled; when Working Mode is FD, Enable Reverse Switching is invalid. l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Step 6 Click OK. ----End


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Related References
A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection

4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link


By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite
l l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Precautions
l l l l l For 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main radio link. For 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link. Before configuring XPIC workgroups, you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization. For N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links respectively. The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, STM-1 count, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link. This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configured unsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link. Step 5 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.
NOTE

The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows: l Set TX Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) according to the network plan. l Set TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. The value of this parameter should not be higher than the rated maximum transmit power of the ODU. l Set TX Status to Unmute. l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set.

Step 6 Click Apply. ----End

Related References
A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup


If you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup, the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and ATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links.

Prerequisite
l l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are added to the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click New. The Create XPIC Working Group dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC protection group.

Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Related References
A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation

4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup


After the XPIC Workgroup is created, you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPIC Integrated IP radio link according to the planned values.

Prerequisite
l l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher. The XPIC protection group has been created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Background Information
The XPIC IF boards, IFX2 and ISX2, support Integrated IP radio, and the AM attributes can be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC Hybrid radio link.

Step 5 Click Apply. ----End

Related References
A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

4.2.12 Synchronizing NE Time


Adjust the NE time so that the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NMS. In this manner, the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal event occurred.

Prerequisite
l l l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured. Time settings on the Web LCT are correct. You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

----End

4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire


The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Click the Advanced tab. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

3.

Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

4.2.14 Checking Alarms


By checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can determine whether the equipment is working properly.

Prerequisite
l l The equipment is connected to the Web LCT. Data configuration is complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab. Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information. Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

on the toolbar.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool


This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool.

4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU


The handheld tool needs to be connected to the IDU before data configuration.

Prerequisite
The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Handheld tool

Procedure
Step 1 Use appropriate cables to connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950, as shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 Connecting the handheld tool to the IDU

Hand-held tool NMS/COM port on the CSH, CST board MINI USB port DB9-female DB9-male RJ-45 connector

Step 2 Press the Power button on the handheld tool until the handheld tool starts. Two seconds later, the login window is displayed.

Step 3 Press Up or Down button to log in to the local NE or another NE, and then press Enter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 4 Optional: If you select to log in to another NE, enter the basic NE ID and extended NE ID. 1. Enter the extended NE ID, and then press Enter.

2.

Enter the basic NE ID, and then press Enter.

3.

Ensure that the NE ID is correct, and then press Enter.

NOTE

If the input basic NE ID or extended NE ID is incorrect, press the C button to return to the upper-level menu and rectify it.

Step 5 The handheld tool is logged in to the system automatically and the NE information is queried. The information about the queried slot is displayed in the standby window.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

4 Site Commissioning

l If the Login Fail ! message is displayed in the login window, the handheld tool starts another login attempt until login succeeds. l Login is completed automatically and may last a long period. Do not press any button in the login process. Otherwise, the system stops the login process. l In the standby window, the handheld tool relogs in to the system any time you press the 0 button. l If the Abnormal Connection message is displayed in the standby window, check the physical connection between the handheld tool and the NE. Ensure that the connection is normal and then relog in to the system. l The upward arrow in the upper right corner of the standby interface indicates the status of the physical connection. If the arrow blinks regularly, the connection is normal. Otherwise, relog in to the system according to the prompt message of the system.

----End

4.3.2 Setting NE Attributes


Setting NE attributes includes setting NE ID, NE IP, and NE name.

Prerequisite
The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.
NOTE

In the case of the Integrated IP radio, the AM function is disabled by default on the handheld tool.

Procedure
Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F2 to configure NE attributes.

Step 2 Set NE name. 1. Select 1-NE name and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2.

Set the NE name according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

4 Site Commissioning

l Only the first 11 characters of the NE name can be displayed on the interface. l An NE name can contain a maximum of 21 characters currently. You can press F1 to shift between different symbols.

3. 1.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Select 2-NE ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

Step 3 Configure NE ID and extended ID.

2. 3. 4.

Set NE ID according to the network plan. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Select 3-Ext-ID and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

5. 6. 1.

Set the extended ID according to the network plan. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Select 5-IP and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

Step 4 Configure NE IP, subnet mask, and gateway NE.

2.

Set NE IP according to the network plan.


NOTE

The IP address is composed of four fields. After you finish one field, press Enter to enter the next field.

3. 4.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Select 6-MSK and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

5. 6. 7.

Set the subnet mask according to the network plan. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Select 7-GNE and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

8. 9.

Set the gate NE according to the network plan. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 5 Select 8-APPLY, and press Enter to save the data. The Confirm Configure ? dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select YES and press Enter to save the data. Then, the system starts saving the previous configuration.
NOTE

l In the configuration process, you can press C to return to the previous menu. l After the system saves the configuration, it automatically backs up the database and the backup operation lasts 30 to 60 seconds. You need to check the backup result. l If you change NE ID or extended ID in the configuration process, the handheld tool automatically relogs in to the system after the system successfully backs up the updated data. Then, the standby interface is displayed. If the system fails in backing up the updated data, the active configuration interface is displayed.

----End

4.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link


To configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information, and protection modes of the radio link.

Prerequisite
The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F1 to configure IF attributes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

NOTE

By default, the system displays the information about the radio link carried by the IF board in the slot with the smallest number.

Step 2 Select the required IF board. 1. Select 1-Board and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed.

2. 3.

Select the online IF board. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.
NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 1. Select 7-Protection and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF 1+1 protection modes is displayed.

2.

Select an IF 1+1 protection mode according to the network plan. When you configure IF 1+1 protection with the handheld tool, the default main/standby IF boards are as follows: Link ID 1 2 3 Slot of Main IF Board 1 3 4 Slot of Standby IF Board 2 5 6

3.

Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

4 Site Commissioning

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

Step 4 Configure IF information for a radio link 1. Select 5-BandWidth and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed.

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, press Enter. Then, the configuration interface is displayed. a. Select a working mode for the ISU2/ISX2 board by pressing the Up and Down keys. Then, press Enter. The configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed.

b. If you select 1-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native E1+ETH) mode. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

c. If you select 2-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native STM-1+ETH) mode. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

d. If you select 3-ISU2/ISX2, the ISU2/ISX2 board works in SDH mode. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.

2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the IF bandwidth according to the network plan.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

3.

Press Enter to return to the previous menu.


NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

4.

Select 6-Modulate and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of modulation modes is displayed.

NOTE

For the ISU2/ISX2 board, interfaces for selecting modulation modes are IF bandwidth-specific.

5. 6.

Select the modulation mode according to the network plan. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.
NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

Step 5 Configure the ODU information of an NE. 1. Select 2-Frequency and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit frequencies is displayed.

2.

Enter the value of transmit frequency (MHz) according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Press the F1 key to enter a point. l If the ODU is online, the system displays the frequency range that the ODU supports.

3. 4.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Select 3-TRSpacing and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of T/R spacing is displayed.

5.

Enter the value of T/R spacing (MHz) according to the network plan.
NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

6.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

7.

Select 4-TX Power and press Enter. Then, the configuration interface of transmit power is displayed.

8.

Enter the value of transmit power (dBm) according to the network plan.
NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

9.

Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 6 Select 8 APPLY and press Enter to confirm the configuration. The system starts delivering the configuration. After the configuration is delivered, the last line of the system interface displays Any Key To Continue. Step 7 Press any key to continue. After the configuration data is saved, the current configuration interface is automatically displayed.
NOTE

The waiting time is about 30 to 60 seconds.

----End

4.3.4 Checking Alarms


By checking the alarms generated on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment is working properly.

Prerequisite
The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

Step 2 Select 5-Current Alarm Query and press Enter. Then, the query interface is displayed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


TIP

4 Site Commissioning

You can press the Up or Down button to check the query result about OptiX RTN 950.

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information. Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. ----End

4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables


During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test connectivity of the cables.

4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT


By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables are properly connected between the equipment and the DDF, and whether the E1 cables are in the normal state.

Prerequisite
The equipment must be equipped with an E1 interface board, and the E1 port must travel through the DDF before being connected to another device.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l Web LCT BER tester

Procedure
Step 1 At the DDF, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU. The BER tester displays the AIS alarm.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-5 Connecting the BER tester


DDF
RX TX

RX

TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 Set the corresponding E1 port to Outloop using the Web LCT. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Outloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

Step 3 Observe the BER tester. The BER tester should not display the AIS alarm any more. Step 4 Release the outloop set in Step 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

Step 5 Observe the BER tester. The BER tester should report the AIS alarm. Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 to test all the other E1 ports. ----End

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool


By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipment and the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When performing site commissioning with the handheld tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables using the PRBS function enabled on the NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Prerequisite
l l The NE houses an E1 interface board, and the E1 port travels through the DDF before being connected to another device. The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Handheld tool

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950. For details, see 4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU. Step 2 On the DDF, perform a hardware loopback at the first E1 port on the IDU.
DDF
RX TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

Step 3 Test the cable connectivity of the first port with the handheld tool. 1. When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

2.

Select 6-E1 Cable Check and press Enter. Then, the tributary board configuration interface is displayed.

3.

Select the tributary board that is connected to the first E1 port, and press Enter to test cable connectivity.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

4.

Check the test result. Port 1 does not fail.

5.

Press any button to display the NE information query interface.

Step 4 Release the hardware loopback that is performed in Step 2. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to test cable connectivity at the other ports. ----End

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables


By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in the normal state.

Prerequisite
The network cables are already made.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Network cable tester

Background Information
You can also test the connectivity of a network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports (this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the network cable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports turn on, it indicates that the network cable is in the normal state.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network cable to the port of the network cable tester.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-6 Testing the Ethernet service cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester. Network Cable End A End B The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another. The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Straight-through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another. Crossover cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Step 3 Connect the network cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device. ----End

4.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection


During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution frame (ODF). This topic mainly describes how to test the fiber jumper connection by using an optical interface board.

Prerequisite
l l The fiber jumper is installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF. The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l Optical power meter Short fiber jumper

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Precautions

DANGER
When you are checking the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams.

Connection Diagram
When you use an optical interface board to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port of the optical interface board on the chassis side. Figure 4-7 shows the connection. Figure 4-7 Connection diagram for checking the fiber jumper connection by using an optical interface board

External Cable

TX

RX

ODF

Fiber jumper connected to the TX port

Procedure
Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface board. Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the TX port of the optical interface board with a short fiber jumper. Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the type of optical interface. The measured launched optical power of the optical interface board is A. Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back into the TX port. Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter. The measured optical power is B.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface board. The optical power meter reads "LO" and does not receive any optical signals. Step 7 Compare the values of A and B. l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range. l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

CAUTION
If the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B should be less than 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation of the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. Verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, Verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean. Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port. Step 9 Restore the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and the ODF side. Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check fiber jumper connections of other optical interfaces and then restore the connections when completed. ----End

4.5 Aligning the Antennas


Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.

4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes


Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge of the main lobe and side lobes

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobes


The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontal azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the vertical section. Figure 4-8 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein the first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-8 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe First side lobe Second side lobe

Locating the Main Lobe


Antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main lobe of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the opposite antenna reach the maximum value. The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, between 0.6 and 3.7. For instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9 when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe. Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level. Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak. Figure 4-9 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe. Figure 4-9 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna
180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe 180o Outer edge of the main lobe, 310 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the main lobe and the first side lobe, 30 dB lower than the main lobe First side lobe, 20-25 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the first side lobe and the second side lobe, 30 dB or more lower than the main lobe a Horizontal section of the antenna b Head-on view Second side lobe, where signals are very weak

90o

0o

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 4-10 shows a horizontal radio propagation model of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU). Figure 4-10 Three tracking paths
Head-on view of tracking paths for different elevations Signal levels for each path 6 7 C B A 4 1 2 6 7 5 3 C' B' A' C 4 B 2 1 A 3 A' 5 B'

C'

Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears. Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe. The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears. Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result, points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown in Figure 4-11, a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD', or top to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10 until the peak signal appears.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-11 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E 1 D D' 1 3 E 3 E' 2 D'

E'

4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas


When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisite
l l l l l l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete. The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain, snow, or fog. On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes. The Multimeter is calibrated. The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled). The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l l l Adjustable wrench Telescope Interphone Hex key Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests) North-stabilized indicator

Precautions
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end, power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennas are aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends. If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas in the following sequence:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

1. 2. 3. 4. l

Power on the main ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during the alignment. Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends. Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end. Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.

If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align the antenna in the following sequence: 1. 2. Power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align the main antennas at both ends. Power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align the diversity antennas at both ends.

CAUTION
You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts or screws. For details, see the installation guide for the antennas.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position. Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at the local end and test the voltage value VBNC.
TIP

It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance, because it is more convenient for testing the voltage value VBNC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-12 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows: 1. 2. Keep the remote antenna fixed. Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in the horizontal direction. When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows: l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10. l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 4-10. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10. l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 4-10. In this case, adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 4-10. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10. 3. 4. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10 until VBNC reaches the peak within the tracked range. Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna at the local end.
NOTE

When you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak value, tighten the antenna at the remote end. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remote end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. Obtain the current RSL by referring to the relationship curve between VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends.
NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the ODU.

The actual RSL must be the same as the value planned by the network planning department.
NOTE

l If VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide for suggestion on how to handle the issue.

Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator should turn off. If the ODU indicator blinks yellow, align the antennas. Step 8 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.
NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process of tightening the screws.

----End

4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas


When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. Engineers also need to adjust the feed booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specified requirements.

Prerequisite
l l l l l l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete. The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain, snow, or fog On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes. The Multimeter is calibrated. The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled). The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Adjustable wrench Telescope Interphone Hex key


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

l l l

Multimeter (with a BNC connector prepared at one end for future tests) North-stabilized indicator Spanner delivered with the OMT

Procedure
Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link. If... The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna Then... Proceed to Step 2 through Step 3. Proceed to Step 4 through Step 14.

Step 2 Adjust the antenna as a single-polarized antenna. For detailed operations, see 4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas. Step 3 After aligning the antennas, power on the ODUs in the vertical and horizontal polarization directions at both ends, and check the XPD. 1. 2. Use the multimeter to measure the received signal levels of the ODUs in the vertical and horizontal polarization directions. Obtain the received signal level in the horizontal polarization direction (P1) and the received signal level in the vertical polarization direction (P2) based on the curve delivered in the ODU carton. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2). If... Then...

3.

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is Release the captive screws of the OMT to less than 30 dB. some extent, and turn the OMT slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should not be less than 30 dB. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is The antenna alignment task is completed. not less than 30 dB. 4. Tighten all the screws of the antennas.
NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas in the process of tightening the screws.

Step 4 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit horizontally polarized signals. Step 5 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna. Step 6 Measure the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end. 1. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized ODU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

2.

Calculate the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the curve diagram delivered along with the ODU.

Step 7 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P4). 1. 2. 3. 4. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU. Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram in the ODU box. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 - P4). If... The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is less than 30 dB Then... Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 8. 5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than 30 dB.

Step 8 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom. Step 9 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit vertically polarized signals. Step 10 Measure the RSL (P5) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step 6. Step 11 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P6). 1. 2. 3. 4. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU. Calculate the RSL (P6) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram delivered along with the ODU. Calculate the XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6). If... The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6) is less than 30 dB Then... Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 - P6) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 12. 5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than 30 dB.

Step 12 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom. Step 13 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD2 and XPD3 are not less than 30 dB.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

4 Site Commissioning

If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.

Step 14 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.


NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process of tightening the screws.

----End

Related Information
In practice, you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized signals.

4.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links


After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are in the normal state.

Prerequisite
The antennas have been aligned.

Procedure
Step 1 Observe the LINK indicator on the IF board.

1.

If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (green), it indicates that the radio link is in the normal state.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

2.

If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration of the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.

----End

4.7 Querying the DCN Status


The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the Search For Opposite NE, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

Prerequisite
l l l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured. The antennas have been aligned. You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Communication > Search For Opposite NE from the Function Tree. Step 2 In the Search For Opposite NE tab, click Query. On the Opposite NE List, basic information about opposite NEs in all microwave directions is displayed.

NOTE

If basic information about the opposite NEs in a certain microwave direction is not displayed, check the configurations in that microwave direction.

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

5
About This Chapter

System Commissioning

System commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all system commissioning items. 5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and the networkwide service data can be configured. 5.2 Testing E1 Services By testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links. 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required. 5.4 Testing ATM Services By testing ATM services, you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links. The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required. 5.5 Testing AM Switching By testing AM switching, you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radio links. 5.6 Testing Protection Switching By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. 5.7 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized. 5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs). 5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing 24-hour BER.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

5.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data


After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the U2000, and the networkwide service data can be configured.
NOTE

This section only includes the basic configuration tasks related to NEs, TDM services, and clocks. For more configuration tasks, see the configuration guide.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method


The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.

Prerequisite
l l The NMS must have proper communication with NEs. You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select Transport NE Search tab. Step 3 Select Search Mode.
NOTE

l If the U2000 server and the gateway NE are in the same network segment, it is recommended that you set Search Mode to IP auto discovery. l In other scenarios, it is recommended that you set Search Mode to Search for NE.

If... Search Mode is set to Search for NE Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery

Then... Perform Step 4 to Step 7. Perform Step 8 to Step 10.

Step 4 If Search Mode is set to Search for NE, you need to add a search domain. 1. 2. Click Add, and then the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed. Select an address type and enter the search address.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

NOTE

l When Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack software is installed on the U2000. l When Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and the U2000 server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment, ensure that the IP routes of the network segments to which the U2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the U2000 and related routers.

3.

Click OK.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to add several search domains. Step 6 In the Search for NE dialog box, perform the operations described in the Note part.
NOTE

l If Create NE after search is selected, you need to specify NE User and Password. l You can select either Create NE after search or Upload after Create or both Create NE after search and Upload after Create. In this manner, after the NE searching is complete, the system automatically creates an NE and uploads the NE.

Step 7 Click Next, and then the Transport NE Search dialog box is displayed. After the search is complete, all the NEs that are found are displayed in the Result list. Step 8 If Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery, enter NE User and Password.

Step 9 Click Next to navigate to the search interface.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 10 After the NE to be created is displayed in Result, click Stop. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. Step 11 Create NEs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select an NE that is not created from the Result list. Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE. Click Create. The Create dialog box is displayed. Specify User Name and Password. Click OK. The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology.

Step 12 Optional: Repeat Step 11 to create other NEs that are not created. ----End

Related References
A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

5.1.2 Changing the NE ID


Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. This operation task does not interrupt services.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed. Step 2 Choose Object Attributes. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click the NE Attribute[xxx] tab.
NOTE

xxx indicates the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 6 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK. Step 7 Click OK. ----End

Related References
A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

5.1.3 Changing the NE Name


To better identify the NE in the Main Topology, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, select the NE whose name is to be changed. Step 2 Right-click on this NE, and then choose Object Attributes from the shortcut menu. The Attributes dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click the NE Attribute [xxx] tab.
NOTE

xxx is the current name of the NE.

Step 4 Enter the name of the NE in Name.


NOTE

The name of an NE cannot contain any space or characters.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the dialog box indicating the operation result. The new name of the NE is displayed below the NE icon in the Main Topology. ----End

5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters


The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP address, and the subnet mask.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE. Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
NOTE

If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.

----End

Related References
A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

5.1.5 Configuring the Logical Board


If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. All the boards must be installed correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the NE icon to open the NE layout diagram. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then choose Add XXX.
NOTE

XXX is the name of the board to be added.

Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then choose Delete. 1. 2. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed again for confirmation, click OK.

NOTE

Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the board.

----End

5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group


If the radio link requires 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, create the IF 1+1 protection group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the NE Panel. The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection configuration by configuring the IF 1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board that carries the original service, however, needs to be set as the working board.

Procedure
Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type to appropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet the network plan requirements. l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards, the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

1. 2. 3. 4.

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan. Click Apply.

Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click Create. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 System Commissioning

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time(s) take its default value.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. ----End

Related References
A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link


By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
l For 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main radio link.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

l l l l

For 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link. Before configuring XPIC workgroups, you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization. For N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links respectively. The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the E1 count, AM enabled status, STM-1 count, or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link. This alarm should be cleared immediately. Otherwise, services may be configured unsuccessfully or interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link that the IF board or ODU connected to the IF board belongs to.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link. 1. Optional: For ISU2/ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type according to the network plan. Click Apply.
NOTE

l After this operation, the IF board will be reset. Set other IF information after the IF board starts up. l For ISU2 and ISX2 boards, set IF Service Type appropriately for the ISU2 and ISX2 boards before configuring IF 1+1 protection, N+1 protection, and XPIC.

2.

Set other IF information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 System Commissioning

l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same. l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.
NOTE

l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.

Step 7 Click Apply. ----End

Related References
A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

5.1.8 Configuring ATPC Attributes


To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.

Precautions
l l For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board. The following procedure describes the ATPC parameter configurations in the IF port configuration dialog box for the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the Create XPIC Protection Group window.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Step 3 Set the parameters of ATPC attributes.

NOTE

l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm). l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

Step 4 Click Apply. ----End

5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time


By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server, you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.

Prerequisite
l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone and time must be set correctly on the PC or server running the NMS software. When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 2 Click the NE Time Synchronization tab. Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then click . Step 4 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Step 5 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set the time synchronization mode and the related parameters. 1. Optional: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately. a. Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.

b. c. 2. 3. 4.

In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

Set Synchronous Mode to NM. Click Apply. Optional: Set auto synchronization parameters. a. Set auto synchronization parameters.

b. c. d.
NOTE

Click Apply. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set Synchronous Mode to NM. l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server.

Step 6 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set the time synchronization mode and the related parameters. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server. Click Apply. Click Close. The dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result is closed. Configure the upper-layer NTP server. a. Select the NE, right-click in the configuration box where the standard NTP server is configured, and then choose New.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

b.

Configure the parameters related to the NTP server.

c. d. 6.

Click Apply. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.


NOTE

Optional: Copy the configuration of the upper-layer NTP server.


Before the copy operation, set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP for the source NE and the target NE.

a. b. c. d. ----End

Select the NE to be copied, right-click, and then choose Copy Standard NTP Server. Select the NE to be pasted, right-click, and then choose Paste Standard NTP Server. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes. Close the displayed operation result dialog box.

Related References
A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services


In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service sink.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on NE Panel.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click Create. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Configure the parameters of a new SDH service.

Step 5 Click OK. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End

Related References
A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources


This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority. Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab. Step 3 Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select the clock sources.


TIP

Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple clock sources.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources. Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click clock source.
NOTE

or

to adjust the priority of this

The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal clock source is always of the lowest priority.

Step 8 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 9 Click Apply. ----End

Related References
A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire


The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Click the Advanced tab. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

3.

Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

5.2 Testing E1 Services


By testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links.
NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode. l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services.

5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester


If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test E1 services.

Prerequisite
The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through the DDF.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l U2000 BER tester
NOTE

For a test of CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 Kbit/s timeslot setting is necessary.

Procedure
Step 1 On the DDF at the central site, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU. The BER tester indicates the AIS alarm.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER tester


DDF
RX TX

RX

TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Step 3 Test the bit errors for two minutes. There should be no bit errors.
NOTE

For a test of CES services, it is necessary to configure 64 Kbit/s timeslots on a BER tester to align with the timeslots carrying CES services.

Step 4 Release the inloop set in Step 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

8.

Click Close.

Step 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to test all other E1 ports. ----End

5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS


If no BER tester is available, you can test E1 services by using the PRBS test system embedded in the equipment.

Prerequisite
l l The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through the DDF. The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions

CAUTION
l When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time. l CES services do not support a PRBS test.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 2 At the central site, on the NMS, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. Step 3 In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PRBS Test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 4 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters: l Direction: Cross l Duration: a value from 120 to 180 l Measured in Time: seconds

Step 5 Click Start to Test. The system displays a dialog box indicating The operation may interrupt the service, are you sure to continue? Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 When the Progress column is 100%, click Query to check the test result. The curve diagram should be green. Step 8 Release the inloop set in Step 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 9 Repeat Step 1 through Step 8 to test all other E1 ports. ----End

5.3 Testing Ethernet Services


By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.

Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be configured.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 System Commissioning

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions when the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode. l The tested Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services, EoS/EoPDH services, or Ethernet services carried by PWs.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


The following test procedure considers the Ethernet service from PORT2 on NE2 and PORT3 on NE3 to PORT1 on NE1 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-2.The three Ethernet ports are not on the EMS6/EFP8 boards. Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services
NE 2 PORT 2

VLAN ID=100 PORT 1 NE 1

NE 3 Microwave network

PORT 3

VLAN ID=200

The VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE2 to NE1 is 100, and the VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE3 to NE1 is 200.
NOTE

If the Ethernet ports are on the EMS6/EFP8 boards, you can still perform the following steps to test the Ethernet services by eliminating the need to set up the remote maintenance end point. In addition, the operations on the NMS are different. For details, see Creating MDs, Creating MAs, Creating MPs, and Performing an LB Test.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain. The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance domains. l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE1, NE2, and NE3


NOTE

The maintenance domain names and the maintenance domain levels of the NEs must be the same.

4.

Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association. The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed. 3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance associations. l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3 l Relevant Service: services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3
NOTE

Click in Relevant Service, and select associated services in the New Maintenance Association dialog box.

4.

Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 3 Configure the MEPs of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point. The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box. 4. Configure the parameters of the new MEPs. l MP ID: 101 for NE1, 102 for NE2, and 103 for NE3 l Direction: Ingress for NE1, NE2, and NE3 l CC Status: activation for NE1, NE2, and NE3
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

5.

Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed. Click New. Then, the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed. 5. Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs. l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 and 103 for NE1, and 101 for NE2 and NE3
NOTE

Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE1 to the MP ID of NE2 and NE3, and set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE2 and NE3 to the MP ID of NE1.

6.

Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of the NE1, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM. Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to Port 1, click OAM. Select Start LB. The LB Test window is displayed. Select Destination Maintenance Point ID, and set the parameters in Test Node. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1) l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE2) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (64 is a recommended value, and the parameter can also be set to 128, 256, 512, 1024, and 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different packet lengths.)
NOTE

The maximum Packet Length is 1400.

l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)

5. 6.

Click Start Test. Check Detection Result. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

7.

Repeat Step 5.4 to Step 5.6 to test the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE3. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1) l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 103 (maintenance point ID of NE3) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended) The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.

----End

5.4 Testing ATM Services


By testing ATM services, you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links. The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.

Prerequisite
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

End-to-end ATM services must be configured.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
When an LB test is performed on the ATM service, the segment and end attribute is set to specify the types of transmitted ATM OAM cells. l l When Segment End Attribute is set to Segment point, segment LB cells are transmitted. When Segment End Attribute is set to Endpoint, end-to-end LB cells are transmitted.

Test Connection Diagram


This example shows how to test the ATM service over a radio link hop. The method for testing the ATM services over multiple radio link hops is the same. Figure 5-3 shows the test connection diagram. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950. The services of the boards on the NE1 and NE2 are configured as follows: Attribute UNI Service source Bound port NE A 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) 3-MD1-1 (Port-1) 3-MD1-2 (Port-2) VPI VCI NNI PW ID Service source Bound port VPI VCI 1 51 1 101 501 NE B 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) 3-MD1-1 (Port-1) 3-MD1-2 (Port-2) 101 501 1 101 501

Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of the ATM service
UNI VPI 1 VCI 51 NNI VPI 101 VCI 501 VPI 101 NNI VCI 501 UNI VPI 101 VCI 501

NodeB

NE A

NE B

RNC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Set the segment and end attributes of the ATM services on the NE A and NE B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Segment and End Attribute tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested. As for NE A and NE B, set Segment and End Attribute to Segment point. As for NE A and NE B, set Connection Direction to Sink. Click Apply. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the LLID tab. Set Country Code, Network Code, and NE Code. Set the parameters of NE A as follows: l Set Country Code to 00 86. l Set Network Code to 00 16. l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00. Set the parameters of NE B as follows: l Set Country Code to 00 86. l Set Network Code to 00 16. l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00.
NOTE

Step 2 Set the identifier at the loopback point from NE A to NE B.

If the default LLID is unique on a network, the default LLID can also be used.

3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Click Apply. Click Close. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B. Click Test to start an LB test. In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded. If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test result.

Step 3 Test the ATM service from NE A to NE B.

Step 4 Test the ATM service from NE B to NE A. 1. 2. 3.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

With reference of Step 1, set Connection Direction of NE A to Sink; set Connection Direction of NE B to Source. Select NE B from the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab, and choose the ATM service to be tested.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

4. 5. 6.

Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B. Click Test to start an LB test. In normal situations, Test Result should be Test succeeded. If the test is not successful, see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test result.

----End

5.5 Testing AM Switching


By testing AM switching, you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radio links.

5.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester


If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test AM switching.

Prerequisite
l l l l The antennas have been aligned. The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled. The E1 service must be configured. The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l U2000 BER tester

Precautions
The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the BER tester to an E1 port on the local NE.
NOTE

Test the E1 services with the highest priority, which are not discarded in the lowest-order modulation mode.

Step 2 On the remote NE, perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 7. 8. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 3 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. Click Apply.

Step 4 Query the AM working status on the local NE. 1. 2. 3. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

Step 5 Use the BER tester to test the bit errors. The test result should show that no bit error occurs. Step 6 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE. 1. 2. 3. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values. Click Apply.

4.

Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE. 1. 2. 3. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 System Commissioning

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

Step 8 Check the BER test result. There should be no bit errors. Step 9 Release the inloop set in Step 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

5.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester


If no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio links.

Prerequisite
l l l The antennas have been aligned. The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled. The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. Click Apply.

Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance. In Monitored Object Filter Criteria, select All. Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute. In Count, select FEC Performance. In Display Options, select Display Zero Data and Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds. Click Query, and then close the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. If the value is not 0, choose Reset on the performance register to clear the existing performance values.

Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE. 1. 2. 3. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

Step 4 Reset the performance event register. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance. Click Reset. The confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. Click Close. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values. Click Apply.

Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.

4.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

1. 2. 3.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab. Click Query. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value.

NOTE

When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

----End

5.6 Testing Protection Switching


By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal over radio links.

5.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching


You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l l l The antennas have been aligned. The equipment is configured with IF 1+1 protection. E1 services are configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l U2000 BER tester

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-4 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l l l l Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3 Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5 Main ODU: ODU in slot 23 Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

NE A

NE B

As shown in Figure 5-4, the following procedures use the E1 services between NE A and NE B that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example.
NOTE

l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs at NE A. l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs at NE A. l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board of Channel in Protection Group before and after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If... A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then... Perform Step 2 through Step 11. Perform Step 6 through Step 10.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 On NE B at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 8. Click Close. Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. Step 5 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse Switching to Enable. Click Apply. Click Close. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board 3-ISU2.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.

Step 7 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute. Click Apply.

Step 8 Check service availability after the switching. If... A BER tester is available on site Then... Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the services are restored after transient interruption. Refer to 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services. Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.

No BER tester is available on site, and the E1 services are transmitted on the radio link No BER tester is available on site, and the Ethernet services are transmitted on the radio link

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board 5-ISU2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 10 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute. Click Apply.

Step 11 Release the software inloop set in Step 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 12 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse Switching to Disable. Click Apply. Click Close.

----End

5.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching


You can verify whether the IF N+1 protection function works normally by checking the working board of the IF N+1 protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l l The antennas have been aligned. The equipment must be configured with the N+1 protection.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

U2000 BER tester


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing N+1 protection switching NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l l l l Main IF boards: ISU2 in slot 3 and ISU2 in slot 5 Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 4 Main ODUs: ODU in slot 23 and ODU in slot 25 Standby ODU: ODU in slot 24

NE A

NE B

As shown in Figure 5-5, the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A and NE B that are configured with the N+1 (N=2) configuration as an example.

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot Mapping Relation before and after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If... A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then... Perform Step 2 to Step 10. Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

7. 8.

Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit error occurs. Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query. In Slot Mapping Relation, Switching Status of the working units 3-ISU2-1 and 5ISU2-1 and the protection unit 4-ISU2-1 should be Normal.

NOTE

If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the N+1 protection testing.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute. Click Apply.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching. If... A BER tester is available on site Then... Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the services are restored after a transient interruption. See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services. See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet service.

No BER tester is available on site, and the E1 services are transmitted on the radio link. No BER tester is available on site, and the Ethernet services are transmitted on the radio link.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query. In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of the working unit 3-ISU2-1 for the service that is configured with the N+1 protection should be SF.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute. Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

5.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching


You can verify whether SNCP works normally by checking the working port of the SNCP protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l l The antennas have been aligned. The equipment is configured with the SNCP.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l U2000 BER tester

Test Connection Diagram


As shown in Figure 5-6, the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A and NE C that are configured with SNCP as an example. Figure 5-6 shows a network composed of radio links, and the test procedures are similar in the case of a network composed of optical fiber links.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing SNCP switching NE A and NE C are configured as follows: l l l l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3 East IF board: ISU2 in slot 4 West ODU: ODU in slot 23 East ODU: ODU in slot 24
NE A

Protecting SNC

Working SNC

NE D NE B

NE C

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Channel in Working Service before an d after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If... A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then... Perform Step 2 through Step 10. Perform Step 5 through Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE C, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. In Working Service, select an SNCP service that is already created, then click Function, and finally select Query Switching Status. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection Service. In Current Status, Normal should be displayed. In Active Channel, Working Channel should be displayed.

Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute. Click Apply.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching. If... A BER tester is available on site Then... Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the services are restored after a transient interruption.
130

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

If... No BER tester is available on site, and the E1 services are transmitted on the radio link.

Then... See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. Click Function, and then select Query Switching Status. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection Service. In Current Status, the service switching mode is displayed. In Active Channel, Protection Channel should be displayed.

Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute. Click Apply.

Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

5.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching


You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l l The equipment is configured with ERPS. The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of ERPS is properly connected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


As shown in Figure 5-7, the following procedures use the Ethernet services that are configured with ERPS between NE A and NE D as an example. The RPL owner node is NE D. Figure 5-7 Configuration for testing ERPS NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D are configured as follows: l l l l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3 East IF board: ISU2 in slot 5 West ODU: ODU in slot 23 East ODU: ODU in slot 25

East

West

NE B Protection channel West NE A

East

NE D

East Working channel West NE C East West

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query. The value of State Machine Status should be Idle.

Step 2 Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute. Click Apply.

Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query. The value of State Machine Status should be Protection.

Step 5 Refer to 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute. Click Apply.

----End

5.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching


By checking the change in the status of MPLS tunnels before and after the MPLS APS switching, you can verify whether the MPLS APS protection function is normal.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Prerequisite
l l The MPLS tunnel protection group must be created properly. You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
1:1 protection In normal situations, services are transmitted in the working tunnel. That is, services are transmitted and received in a different tunnel respectively. When the working tunnel is faulty, the equipment at the transmit end transmits services through the protection tunnel, and the equipment at the receive end receive services through the protection tunnel after a negotiation through the APS protocol. Therefore, service switching is realized.

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-8 shows the connection diagram for testing MPLS APS protection switching. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950 NEs. Figure 5-8 Connection diagram for testing the MPLS APS protection
Working Tunnel NE A NE B

Protection Tunnel

Procedure
Step 1 Query the switching status of the current MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection group on NE A and NE B. 1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab, right-click the tested protection group, and then choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu, to check the MPLS protection group configured on the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

3.

Choose the protection group for switching, and check its switching status. In normal situations, the switching status should be Normal.

Step 2 Switch the services to the protection tunnel manually and forcedly. 1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. Right-click the tested protection group, and then choose Forced Switching from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

l Forced switching: With the highest priority, the operation is performed no matter whether the current status of the protection tunnel is normal. l Manual switching: The operation is performed only when the status of the protection tunnel is normal.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 4. 5. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 3 Query the switching status of the MPLS 1:1 protection groups on NE A and NE B after the switching.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

1. 2. 3.

In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu, to check Switching Status of the tunnel protection group. In normal situations, the switching status should be Forced Switching. Query Active Tunnel of the tunnel protection group. In normal situation, Working should be Standby, and Protection should be Active.

4.

NOTE

l If Forced Switching is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group should be Forced Switching. l If Manual Switching to Protection is performed at the previous step, the state of the protection group should be Manual (Working to Protection) Switching.

Step 4 Restore the services on NE A and NE B to the working tunnel. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the NE Explorer, select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Clear from the shortcut menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Click Query. Services is restored to the working tunnel. ----End

5.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching


You can verify whether the linear MSP group works normally by checking the working port of the linear MSP group before and after the switching.

Prerequisite
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The equipment must be configured with linear MSP.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l U2000 BER tester

Test Connection Diagram


Figure 5-9 shows linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN equipment through the connection of optical fibers. The following procedures consider the E1 services from NE A to NE B as an example. Figure 5-9 Configuration for testing linear MSP switching
NE A Working channel NE B

Protection channel

Precautions
NOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot Mapping Relation before and after the protection switching.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. If... A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then... Perform Step 2 to Step 10. Perform Step 5 to Step 9.

Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the corresponding E1 port by using the NMS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

6. 7. 8.

Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. If bit errors occur, see the Maintenance Guide for handling the bit errors. Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status. In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Idle.

NOTE

In the case of the working and protection units of the services that are configured with the linear MSP, the values of West Switching Status should be Idle. If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and proceed with the linear MSP switching testing.

Step 6 Shut down the laser for the working unit on NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to Close. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 7 Check service availability after the switching. If... The BER tester is available on site Then... Check the test result on the BER tester. It should show that the services are restored after a transient interruption.
138

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

If... No BER tester is available on site, and the E1 services are transmitted on the optical fiber link.

Then... See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services.

Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status. In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Switch upon signal failure.

NOTE

In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive. l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the services are restored. If Revertive Mode is set to Revertive for the linear MSP, the change in values of West Switching Status and Protected Unit can be queried after the WTR time expires. l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the services are restored. If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP, stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore the value of West Switching Status to Idle.

Step 9 Turn on the laser for the working unit on NE A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to Open. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

5. 6. 7. 8.

Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

5.7 Checking the Clock Status


Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized.

Prerequisite
The clock configuration is complete. The link that transmits clocks is in the normal state.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Query.
NOTE

l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network, this clock should be in freerun mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in locked mode. l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network, the clocks of all the NEs should be in locked mode.

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network. ----End

5.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link


The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).

Prerequisite
l l The weather is favorable. The antennas must be aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the radio link and the crosspolarization discrimination (XPD) must meet the requirements.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Background Information
The principle of the FM test is as follows: l l l Test the corresponding relations between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites. Calculate the RSL corresponding to the demodulation threshold of the MSE, that is, the receiver sensitivity of the site. The current RSL minus the receiver sensitivity is the FM.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
1. 2. 3. The FM test can be supported by the IFU2 board and IFX2 board. When the FM is tested, all the services carried on the radio link maybe interrupted. For a radio link with 1+1 protection, it is recommended that you lock the protection path before testing the main radio link and that you switch the signal to the standby path forcedly before you test the standby radio link. The main and standby radio paths are tested synchronously. Therefore, the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at the same time. For an XPIC radio link, the paths in polarization direction V and polarization direction H are tested synchronously. Therefore, the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at the same time.

4.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Lock the protection channel if the radio link between two sites is under 1+1 protection. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > IF 1 +1 Protection from the Function Tree. In Slot Mapping Relation, select the working unit or protection unit. Then, right-click the selected unit. Choose Protection Lockout from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, click OK. Click OK again to close the dialog box. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > IF Interface. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. Click Apply.

Step 2 Disable the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites.

Step 3 Optional: If any E1 services between the two sites are E1 Priority enabled, delete these E1 services. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Select the services, and right-click Delete.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

A confirmation dialog box is displayed to prompt you whether to delete the selected services. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click OK. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Select the required IF board, and set Enable E1 Priority to Disable. Click Apply. Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Status to Disabled. Set Manual Modulation Mode to the highest-efficiency modulation scheme. Click Apply. Step 4 Disable the E1 priority function and AM function on the radio link between two sites.

Step 5 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Fade Margin. Step 6 Click the Fade Margin tab. Step 7 Select the IF board corresponding to the radio link that needs to be tested.

The Result dialog box displays the query result.

Step 8 In Direction, select Remote To Local.

Step 9 Click Start. The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 10 Repeat Step 8 and Step 9. In Direction, select Local To Remote. The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful. Step 11 Restore the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Set ATPC Enable Status to Enabled. Click Apply.

Step 12 Restore the AM function and E1 priority on the radio link between two sites. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

3. 4. 5. 6.

Select the corresponding IF board, and set AM Status to Enabled. Set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to initial values. Set Enable E1 priority to Enabled, and Full E1 Capacity to the initial value. Click Apply.

Step 13 Optional: Reconfigure the E1 services that were deleted in Step 3. 1. 2. 3. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Reconfigure all deleted E1 services, and click OK.

Step 14 Optional: Cancel the protection lockout for the 1+1 protection on the radio link. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. In Slot Mapping Relation, select the working unit or protection unit. Then, right-click the selected unit. Choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box.

----End

5.9 Testing 24-Hour BER


You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing 24-hour BER.

Prerequisite
l l The antennas must be aligned. The E1 service must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l U2000 BER tester E1 jumper

Precautions
l If 24-hour BER cannot be tested for each hop of link because of restrictions of the actual situation, perform the test for the E1 services at the first node and the last node. Through this method, you can ensure that the test path cover all the radio links. The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 System Commissioning

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode. l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services. l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 kbit/s timeslot setting is necessary. l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode, test the E1 services one by one if the number of timeslots of the services is different from each other. Do not test the services in a serial manner. l To test CES E1 services, disable the automatic loopback release function on the PDH interface board. 1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Menu. The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window is displayed. 2. Select the required NEs in the Object Tree on the left side of the Automatic Disabling of NE Function window. Then, click selected NEs. 4. Click Apply. . The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window lists the

3. For SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.

Procedure
Step 1 At the central site, extract several typical E1 services on the equipment and then connect them to the DDF in a serial manner. After that, input these services into the BER tester.
DDF
RX TX

RX

TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 On the equipment at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 3 Perform the 24-hour BER test by using the BER tester.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 4 Record the test result, which should meet the design requirements. Step 5 Release the loopback and serial connection. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
l l If the first 24-hour BER test does not meet the specified requirement, find out the cause and rectify the fault. Perform another 24-hour BER test until the test is passed. If the BER exceeds the nominal value in the test for a serial connection, locate the fault by using the dichotomizing search or other methods until each channel passes the 24-hour BER test independently.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

Introduction to the Handheld Tool

About This Chapter


To improve commissioning efficiency, Huawei has developed the handheld tool dedicated to the site commissioning of the OptiX RTN equipment. 6.1 Functions and Features The handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site commissioning of microwave equipment. 6.2 Operation Interface The handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

6.1 Functions and Features


The handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site commissioning of microwave equipment. The handheld tool provides the following functions: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Supports switch-on by pressing and holding the power button. Supports automatic login to the NE upon switch-on, and supports serial port login mode from MML to NMS. Automatically adds logical boards for in-position physical boards. Automatically changes the LCT access enabling status to Enable. Displays all in-service physical board information in the standby window. Supports settings of IF information through the F1 key, settings of NE attributes through function key F2, and query of configurations through function key F3. Supports settings and query of IF information, including transmit frequency, transmit power, T/R spacing, IF channel bandwidth, modulation mode, and 1+1 protection scheme. Supports settings and query of NE attributes, including NE name, NE ID, extended ID, extended ECC, IP address, and subnet mask. Supports settings and query of the DCN of an NE. Supports regular query of the receive power of an ODU. Supports query of the basic information, frequency range, power range, and serial number of an ODU. Supports query of all current alarms on the NE. Supports query of the NE version and terminal version. Supports automatic backup to the flash memory for data protection after the NE databases are updated. Supports a real-time check on the physical connections between the handheld tool and the NE when the user interface is in standby state. Supports automatic re-login in the case of disconnection.

6.2 Operation Interface


The handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface. The handheld tool is available in two types: type I and type IV. The two types are the same in function, but are different in exterior and key arrangement. The following figure shows the exterior and key arrangement of the two types of handheld tool.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool

Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I handheld tool

Screen

Charge indicator Communication indicator Power key

Digit keys

Decimal points Up and down keys Backspace Function keys Communication port Back Reset port cover lock Battery area

The keys include digit keys, function keys, power key, and confirmation key. The window mainly displays configuration information about the NE and modification.

Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type IV handheld tool

Screen

Up and down keys Reset port Digit keys

Backspace Charge indicator

1 4 7 C

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

F1 F2 F3

Communication port Function keys

Power key Front Back

Type I and type IV are almost the same. The main difference is with regard to the key arrangement.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Configuration Example of Service Data

About This Chapter


This topic uses an example of configuring service data of one hop of TDM radio equipment to describe how to configure service data. 7.1 Networking Diagram This topic describes the networking information about the NEs. 7.2 Board Configurations Before performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the board configurations of each NE. 7.3 Service Planning The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring the NE data. 7.4 Configuration Process This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

7.1 Networking Diagram


This topic describes the networking information about the NEs. As shown in Figure 7-1, there is a TDM radio link between NE A and NE B that are constructed by the OptiX RTN 950, you need to configure 1+1 HSB for the radio link between NE A and NE B. Figure 7-1 Networking diagram
101 14930M 14510M 8E17M16QAM 1+1 HSB H-polarzation

Tx high

Tx low

NE A
Link ID Tx high station Tx Freq. Tx low station Tx Freq. Radio work mode RF configuarion Polarization

NE B

7.2 Board Configurations


Before performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the board configurations of each NE. The board configurations of NE A are the same as the board configurations of NE B, as shown in Figure 7-2. Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram
SLOT 10 (PIU) SLOT 11 SLOT (FAN) 9 (PIU) CST IF1 IF1 SLOT 7 SLOT 5 SLOT 3 SLOT 1 SP3D CST SLOT 7 SLOT 6 SLOT 4 SLOT 2

NOTE

The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 20+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not shown in the board layout diagram.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

7.3 Service Planning


The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring the NE data.

NE attributes
Parameter Equipment type NE ID extended ID NE IP address NE A OptiX RTN 950 101 9 (default value) 129.9.0.101 NE B OptiX RTN 950 102 9 (default value) 129.9.0.102

Radio Link Information


Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links Parameter Tx high site Tx low site Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz) Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Microwave working mode Link protection mode Polarization directiona Transmit power (dBm) Link 1 NE A NE B 14930 14510 420 4) 8E1, 7MHz, 16QAM 1+1 HSB H (horizontal polarization) 5 (NE A) 5 (NE B) Receive power (dBm) -42 (NE A) -42 (NE B) ATPC enabling Disabled

NOTE a: This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not related to the IDU configuration.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Information About IF Boards


Based on the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1 protection, you can obtain the information of IF boards as shown in Table 7-2. Table 7-2 Information about IF boards Parameter Main IF board Standby IF board RF configuration mode Revertive mode Wait to Restore Time Enable Reverse Switching Link 1 3-IF1 5-IF1 1+1 HSB Revertive (default value) 600 seconds (default value) Disabled

Timeslot Allocation Information


Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram
Links-1: NE A-NE B Station NE A Timeslot VC4-1 VC12: 1-8 2-SP3D:1-8 Add/Drop Foward 3-IF1 3-IF1 VC12: 1-8 2-SP3D:1-8 NE B

Figure 7-3shows the service timeslots between NEs. E1 services between NE A and NE B: Ports 1-8 on the SP3D board in slot 2 add/drop services.

Clock and Orderwire Information


Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information Parameter Clock source First clock source Second clock source Third clock source
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

NE A Internal clock source -

NE B 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 Internal clock source


153

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter Orderw ire Orderwire phone number Call waiting time Orderwire port

NE A 101 5 seconds 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1

NE B 102 5 seconds 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 E1

Occupied overhead type

E1

7.4 Configuration Process


This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Precautions
If operations including changing the ID of an NE, modifying the parameters of NE communication, and configuring logical boards are already performed, start site commissioning from Step 5.

Procedure
Step 1 See Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs. The parameters are set as follows. Parameter Network Segment Value 129.9.255.255

NOTE

In this example, the following assumptions are made: the IP address of the gateway NE is never changed and the specific IP address is unknown. Therefore, the network segment 129.9.255.255 is used as the search domain to search for NEs. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP address of the gateway NE as the search domain.

In normal cases, NE A and NE B are created in NE List. Step 2 See Changing the ID of an NE and change NE IDs. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value NE A ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

NE B 102
154

101
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter

Value NE A NE B 9 (default value)

Extended ID

9 (default value)

Step 3 See Configuring Logical Boards and configure logical boards. Configure logical boards based on their mapping relationships with the physical boards. Step 4 See Synchronizing NE Time and synchronize the NE time. Step 5 See Creating IF 1+1 Protection and create IF 1+1 protection. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value NE A Working Mode Revertive Mode WTR Time(s) Enable Reverse Switching Working Board Protection Boar HSB Revertive Mode 600 Disabled 3-IF1A-1 5-IF1-1 NE B HSB Revertive Mode 600 Disabled 3-IF1A-1 5-IF1-1

Step 6 See Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU information. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value (NE A) 3-IF1 & 23-ODU Work Mode Link ID TX Frequency(MHz) T/R Spacing(MHz) TX Power(dBm) TX Status Receive Power (dBm) ATPC Enable Status 4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM 101 14930 420 5 Unmute -42 Disabled Value (NE B) 3-IF1 & 23-ODU 4) 8E1,7MHz,16QAM 101 14510 420 5 Unmute -42 Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Step 7 See Creating Cross-Connections for Point-to-Point Services and create the crossconnections. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value NE A Level Direction Source Source VC4 Source Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1,3-6) VC-12 Bidirectional 3-IF1-1 VC4-1 1-8 2-SP3D 1-8 NE B VC-12 Bidirectional 3-IF1-1 VC4-1 1-8 2-SP3D 1-8

Step 8 See Configuring a Clock Source and configure clock sources. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value NE A Clock Source Internal Clock Source NE B 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 Internal Clock Source

Step 9 See Configuring the Orderwire Phone and configure the orderwire phone. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value NE A Call Waiting Time(s) Phone 1 Orderwire Port 9 101 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

NE B 9 102 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1


156

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Parameter

Value NE A NE B E1

Occupied Overhead Byte

E1

----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE. A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting. A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection. A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group. A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU. A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes. A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections. A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source. A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features. A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

A.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching


This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Parameters for the Search Field


Parameter Address Type Value Range IP Address of GNE NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE Default Value IP Address Range of GNE Description l If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only. l If the IP protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE, select IP Address Range of GNE. l To select the gateway NE only, select IP Address of GNE.
NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments, ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Search Address

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE, enter the IP address of the gateway NE, such as 129.9.x.x. l If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE, enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located, such as 129.9.255.255. l If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE.

User Name

This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE. This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.

Password

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter for Searching for NEs


Parameter Create NE after search Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description l To create NEs in batches, it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. The NEs are automatically created after they are found. l After Create NE after search is selected, enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE.
NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected, Search for NE is selected automatically.

NE User

l This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.

Password

l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Upload after create

Value Range Selected Deselected

Default Value Deselected

Description l This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created. l If only Upload after create is selected, Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.

Parameter for the Found NEs


Parameter NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE, which consists of extended ID and NE ID. This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. Connection Mode Common Security SSL Common The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port.

GNE Address

GNE ID

Created As GNE

Yes No

Yes

Port

1400

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter NE Status

Value Range Created Uncreated

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.

Related Tasks
5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE


This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE.

Navigation Path
In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.

Parameters
Parameter User Name Value Range Default Value lct Description This parameter specifies the name of the user. This parameter can take the default value in the case of initial login. The default password of user lct is password. When this parameter is selected, enter User Name and Password to log in to all the selected NEs. When this parameter is selected, enter User Name and Password that were used for the latest login to log in to the NE.

Password Use the same user name and password to login Use the user name and password that was used last time

Selected Deselected Selected Deselected

Deselected

Deselected

Related Tasks
4.2.3 Logging In to an NE

A.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change


This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs


Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.
NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

New Extended ID

1 to 254

If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.

Related Tasks
4.2.4 Changing the NE ID

A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs


This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed. Choose Object Attributes. Click Modify NE ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Changing NE IDs


Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.
NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

New Extended ID

1 to 254

If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.

Related Tasks
5.1.2 Changing the NE ID

A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting


This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting


Parameter IP Address Value Range Default Value Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID. Description In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask

Value Range -

Default Value 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

Description the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1. l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

Extended ID

1 to 254

NSAP Address

This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Connection Mode

Value Range Common + Security SSL Common Security SSL

Default Value Common + Security SSL

Description l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE. l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS, Connection Mode can be set to Common. l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking, Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level, Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.

Related Tasks
4.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters 5.1.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters

A.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range ISX2: 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M Polarization Direction-V Polarization Direction-H l This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. l It is recommended that you install the two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup in the slots that are at the same layer or in the same column, and set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-H. l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H. l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. l When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. l These two parameters are set according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but Link ID-V must be set to the same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link. Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the channel spacing when the XPIC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used.

Link ID-V Link ID-H

1 to 4094

1 2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Transmit Power (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)

l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Frequency(MHz)

l This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Transmission Status

unmute mute

unmute

l When this parameter is set to mute, the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Enabled

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-45.0 -70.0

l The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.

Related Tasks
4.2.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

A.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Parameter Group ID Polarization Direction-V Link ID-V Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds.

Polarization Direction-H Link ID-H

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth

Value Range ISX2: 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M

Default Value -

Description l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Power to Be Received -V(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Power to Be Received -H(dBm)

Value Range -90.0 to -20.0

Default Value -10.0

Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)

l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Transmit Power (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Frequency(MHz)

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Transmission Status

unmute mute

unmute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration


Parameter Group ID Polarization direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter AM Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled.

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode

Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

Default Value QPSK

Description This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.

Transmit-End Modulation Mode Receive-End Modulation Mode

Displays the modulation mode at the transmit end. Displays the modulation mode at the receive end.

Parameters for ATPC Management


Parameter Group ID ATPC Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Disabled Enabled

Related Tasks
4.2.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup

A.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection


This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD Default Value HSB Description l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value 600

Description l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board Protection Board

This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Alarm Report Mode

Value Range Only board alarms Only Protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms

Default Value -

Description l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms, only IF board alarms are reported. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms, alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms, IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults.
NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time

0 to 600

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0, a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded, but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks
4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create


This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD Default Value HSB Description l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value 600

Description l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value.

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When Enable Reverse Switching at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled.

Working Board Protection Board

This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Alarm Report Mode

Value Range Only board alarms Only protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms

Default Value Only board alarms

Description l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms, only IF board alarms are reported. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms, alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms, IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults.
NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time(s)

0 to 600

300

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0, a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded, but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Related Tasks
5.1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

A.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration


This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

2.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Parameters for Configuring the IF


Parameter Work Mode Value Range 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Link ID

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value 1

Description l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.

Received Link ID

l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth

Value Range 3.5M 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M

Default Value -

Description IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the network plan.
NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 40M. l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M only for the ISU2 board.

AM Mode AM Enable Status

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 950. l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M for the ISU2 board, the AM function is unavailable and AM Enable Status must be set to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually Specified Modulation Mode

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

QPSK

l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

Default Value QPSK

Description l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Guarantee E1 Capacity

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Guarantee E1 Capacity Range Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Enable E1 Priority

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode. Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board. l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Full E1 Capacity

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity Range

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RF


Parameter TX Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Range of TX Frequency(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU.

Actual TX Frequency(MHz) Actual RX Frequency(MHz) T/R Spacing(MHz)

This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU. l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.

Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)

This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the Power


Parameter TX Power(dBm) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan. Range of TX Power(dBm) Actual TX Power (dBm) This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU. l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Power to Be Received(dBm)

Value Range -90.0 to -20.0

Default Value -10.0

Description l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Actual RX Power (dBm) TX Status

Unmute Mute

Unmute

This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.

Actual TX Status

This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Equipment Information
Parameter Frequency(GHz) Equip Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates. l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. Station Type l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station. Produce SN This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.

Transmission Power Level

Related Tasks
4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link 5.1.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-45.0 -70.0

l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm).

ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)

l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.

A.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization


This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization


Parameter NE Name NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Synchronous Mode

Value Range Standard NTP NM Null

Default Value Null

Description l If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server. l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP.

Standard NTP Authentication

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server


Parameter Standard NTP Server Identifier Value Range NE ID IP Default Value NE ID Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Standard NTP Server

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server Key

0 to 1024

l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0". l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization


Parameter Synchronization Starting Time Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter DST

Value Range Selected Deselected

Default Value Deselected

Description l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time. l This parameter is set according to the actual situation.

Synchronization Period (days)

1 to 300

l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Related Tasks
5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time 5.1.9 Synchronizing the NE Time

A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation


This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection. Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value VC12 Description l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Direction Bidirectional Unidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Source Slot Source VC4 This parameter specifies the slot of the service source. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Sink Slot Sink VC4

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

E1 Priority

High Low None

l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created.

Activate Immediately

Yes No

Yes

l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. l To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE, set this parameter to Yes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Related Tasks
5.1.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services

A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Parameters
Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 7. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 8. l The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. l The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter External Clock Source Mode

Value Range 2 Mbit/s 2 MHz

Default Value 2Mbit/s

Description l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. l This parameter is set according to the external clock signal. In normal cases, the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.

Synchronous Status Byte

SA4 to SA8

SA4

l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. l This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. In normal cases, the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM.

Clock Source Priority Sequence (Highest: 1)

Displays the priority sequence of clock sources. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority.

Related Tasks
5.1.11 Configuring the Clock Sources

A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General


This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

2.

Click the General tab.

Parameters
Parameter Call Waiting Time (s) Value Range 1 to 9 Default Value 9 Description l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time, it automatically removes the communication connection. l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. l The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs. Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency Conference Call Dual-Tone Frequency This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone.

888

l This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950 receives the call, the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameter Phone 1

Value Range 100 to 99999999

Default Value 101

Description l This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. l The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number. l The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs. l The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888.

Available Orderwire Port Selected Orderwire Port

This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone. This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.

Related Tasks
4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire 5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire

A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced


This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones


Parameter Orderwire Occupied Bytes Value Range E1 E2 Default Value E1 Description l This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals. l Regardless the parameter value, the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals. Hence, this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

Related Tasks
4.2.13 Configuring the Orderwire 5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

B
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. B.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers. B.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. B.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. B.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O. B.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. B.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

Glossary

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

B.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers. 1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

B.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A
ABR ACAP access control list ACL adaptive modulation See available bit rate See adjacent channel alternate polarization A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. See access control list A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. See analog to digital converter Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. See assured forwarding A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

ADC add/drop multiplexer

Address Resolution Protocol

adjacent channel alternate polarization ADM administrative unit

AF aggregation

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

AIS

See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. alarm cascading Alarm Filtering The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. See adaptive modulation An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM permanent virtual circuit See automatic transmit power control A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. See administrative unit Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

AM analog to digital converter APS ARP assured forwarding

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM ATM PVC ATPC attenuator AU automatic protection switching automatic transmit power control available bit rate

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

B
backward defect indication bandwidth When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.

base station controller

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. basic input/output system BDI BE BER best effort A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. See backward defect indication See best effort See bit error rate A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability. The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material). See basic input/output system See bit interleaved parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See bridge protocol data unit

binding strap BIOS BIP bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity

BPDU

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

bridge protocol data unit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. See base station controller See base transceiver station A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

broadcast BSC BTS buffer

C
cable tie cable tray cable trough CAR CBR CBS CC CCC CCDP CCM CE The tape used to bind the cables. N/A N/A See committed access rate See constant bit rate See committed burst size See connectivity check See circuit cross connect See co-channel dual polarization See continuity check message See customer edge

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. CES CF CGMP channel See circuit emulation service See compact flash See Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

CIR circuit cross connect circuit emulation service

See committed information rate An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. N/A See common and internal spanning tree A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Cisco Group Management Protocol CIST CIST root clock tracing co-channel dual polarization coarse wavelength division multiplexing colored packet committed access rate

committed burst size

committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. common and internal spanning tree compact flash The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

concatenation connectivity check

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

constant bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. CCM is used to detect the link status. Used to protect optical fibers. See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

continuity check message corrugated pipe CPU CRC cross polarization interference cancellation customer edge CWDM cyclic redundancy check

D
data communication network data communications channel A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See direct current See DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return isolate (with ground) A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

Datagram DC DC-C DC-C DC-C DC-I DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC DCN DDF DDN DE differentiated services See data communications channel See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network See discard eligible A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers. See differentiated services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See differentiated services code point

differentiated services code point

DiffServ digital data network

digital distribution frame digital modulation

direct current discard eligible

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DS boundary node DS domain

DS interior node DS node DSCP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E
E-Aggr E-LAN E-Line E-Tree EBS ECC EF electromagnetic compatibility See Ethernet aggregation See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet line See Ethernet-tree See excess burst size See embedded control channel See expedited forwarding Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. See Ethernet ring protection switching See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

electromagnetic interference electrostatic discharge embedded control channel EMC EMI Engineering label EPL EPLAN equalization ERPS ESD ESD jack Ethernet

Ethernet

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

Ethernet aggregation Ethernet LAN Ethernet line Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet ring protection switching Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line Ethernet-tree ETS ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL EVPLAN excess burst size

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, expanding the capacity of the storage system. The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

Exercise Switching expansion expedited forwarding

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

B.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation. See frequency diversity See forward defect indication See fast Ethernet See forward error correction fast failure detection A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

fast Ethernet

fast link pulse FD FDI FE FEC FFD fiber patch cord field programmable gate array

FIFO File Transfer Protocol

First in First out Forced switch

forward defect indication

forward error correction

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

Forwarding plane FPGA fragment Fragmentation frame

Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. See field programmable gate array Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet. A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.

frequency diversity

FTP full-duplex

G
gateway network element GE generic framing procedure A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit Ethernet A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP gigabit Ethernet See generic framing procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System

Global Positioning System GNE GPS

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS GUI guide rail See generic traffic shaping See graphical user interface Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H
HA half-duplex See high availability A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. See high level data link control A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis. Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. See higher order path See hierarchical quality of service See hot standby See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

HDLC hierarchical quality of service

high availability

high level data link control High Speed Downlink Packet Access

higher order path Hold priority

hop hot standby

HP HQoS HSB HSDPA


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

HSM HTB hybrid radio

hitless switch mode high tributary bus The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.

I
ICMP IDU IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping See Internet Control Message Protocol See indoor unit See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See intermediate frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See inverse multiplexing over ATM The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

IMA indoor unit Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See Internet protocol version 6 See Internet protocol version 6 See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Internet Engineering Task Force

Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol

Internet protocol version 6

Internet protocol version 6

inverse multiplexing over ATM

IP IPV6 IPv6 IS-IS ISO IST ITU-T

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

B.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L
L2VPN label switched path See Layer 2 virtual private network A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network See local area network link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

label switching router

LACP LAG LAN LAN LAPS Laser

layer 2 switch

Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB LCAS LCT line rate line rate forwarding Link Aggregation Control Protocol See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme local craft terminal The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. linear multiplex section protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame loss of multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. lower order path link-state pass through See label switched path

Link Protection

LMSP local area network

local area network

Locked switching

LOF LOM loopback LOP LOS Loss Of Frame

loss of pointer

Loss Of Signal LP LPT LSP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

LSR

See label switching router

M
MA MAC MAC MADM main topology See maintenance association See media access control See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the humanmachine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here. That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

maintenance association maintenance association end point

maintenance domain maintenance point management information base manual switch

maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. MBS MCF MD MDI Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

maximum burst size See message communication function See maintenance domain See medium dependent interface The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

media access control

A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission. See maintenance association end point maintenance end point The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs. See management information base maintenance intermediate point A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. See maintenance point maintenance point identification See Multiprotocol Label Switching The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

media access control

medium dependent interface MEP MEP message communication function MIB MIP mounting ear MP MPID MPLS MPLS L2VPN

MPLS OAM

MPLS TE

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

MPLS TE tunnel

In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. See multiplex section See multiplex section protection See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See Mean Time Between Failures See Mean Time To Repair See maximum transmission unit A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. N/A

MS MSP MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multicast

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

multiplex section multiplex section protection Multiprotocol Label Switching

multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

N
N+1 protection NE NE Explorer A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. See network element The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

network element

A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board.

Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. network to network interface next hop NLP NMS NNI node An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements. The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination. normal link pulse See Network Management System See network to network interface A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device. A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer. See non-gateway network element See network service access point not stop forwarding

Node Protection

non-gateway network element non-GNE NSAP NSF

O
OAM ODF ODU OM One-to-One Backup See operation, administration and maintenance See optical distribution frame See outdoor unit Operation and maintenance A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR.

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

Open Systems Interconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector).+ A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. See Open Systems Interconnection See open shortest path first The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals. A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

operation, administration and maintenance

optic fiber connector

optical distribution frame orderwire OSI OSPF outdoor unit Outloop Output optical power

B.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P
packet switched network Packing case Path A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet loss ratio or other aspects. See peak burst size See printed circuit board

PBS PCB

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

PCI bus PDH PDU PE peak burst size

PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems. See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See protocol data unit See provider edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE). See per-hop behavior See penultimate hop popping See peak information rate physical link aggregation A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

peak information rate penultimate hop popping

per-hop behavior

PHB PHP PIR PLA plesiochronous digital hierarchy

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. See Point-to-Point Protocol See priority queue See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock

Power box PPP PQ PRBS PRC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

printed circuit board

A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

priority queue

protection ground cable Protection path protocol data unit provider edge

pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. PSN PTN PW PWE3 See packet switched network packet transport network See pseudo wire See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user. See quality of service See quadrature phase shift keying

QoS QPSK

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

quality of service

A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.

R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.

radio network controller

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RDI received signal level Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Sensitivity RED Reed-Solomon-Code An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. See remote defect indication The signal level at a receiver input terminal. The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open). See random early detection A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site. See remote error indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal.

REI remote defect indication

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

Resource Reservation Protocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate. See radio frequency See Request For Comments See Routing Information Protocol remote network monitoring remote network monitoring See radio network controller An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. See received signal level See Received Signal Strength Indicator See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol radio transmission node

reverse pressure

RF RFC RIP RMON RMON RNC Root alarm route route table

Routing Information Protocol

routing table

RSL RSSI RSTP RSVP RTN

S
SD SDH SEMF See space diversity See synchronous digital hierarchy See synchronous equipment management function

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service Level Agreement * A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure. See severely errored second The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels.

SES Setup Priority

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction). SF SFP side trough signal cable signal fail signal to noise ratio See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points. See service level agreement See Service Level Agreement * To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See subnetwork connection

Simple Network Management Protocol

simplex SLA SLA* Slicing small form-factor pluggable SNC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

SNCP SNMP SNR space diversity

See subnetwork connection protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM static virtual circuit See Synchronization Status Message Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM STM-1 STM-N STP sub-network See Synchronous Transport Module See synchronous transport mode-1 See synchronous transport module of order N See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment under their management. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnet mask

subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC switch See static virtual circuit To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronous digital hierarchy A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.

synchronous equipment management function

synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64. module of order N

T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. tag control information See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering See traffic engineering database

Tail drop

TCI TCP TDM TE TEDB

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

TIM time division multiplexing

trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Telecommunication Management Network A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header. See tributary protection switch A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads. TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network. It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. See two rate three color marker See time to live tributary unit A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.

time to live

TMN ToS priority TPS traffic engineering

traffic engineering database

Traffic shaping

Transmission Control Protocol

tributary protection switch trTCM TTL TU Tunnel

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

two rate three color marker

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.

B.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U
U-VLAN UAS UBR UDP underfloor cabling UNI unicast unspecified bit rate A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN. unavailable second See unspecified bit rate See User Datagram Protocol The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See user network interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.

upload

User Datagram Protocol

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).

V
V-UNI variable bit rate See virtual user-network interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. See variable bit rate See virtual container
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

VBR VC
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

VCC VCG VCI VCTRUNK virtual channel connection virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container

See virtual channel connection See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual local area network virtual path identifier virtual private LAN service

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs, performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS. See virtual local area network An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private LAN service See virtual private network See virtual route forward

virtual user-network interface VLAN voice over IP

VoIP VPI VPLS VPN VRF

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

W
wait to restore WAN Web LCT weighted fair queuing The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line. See wide area network The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ wide area network See weighted fair queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. See weighted random early detection See weighted round Robin See wait to restore

winding pipe WRED WRR WTR

X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241